JP2017038646A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest in a game regarding a change in a display mode of hold display.SOLUTION: Depending on whether a type of display of a change target of hold display or active display is either text icon display or character icon display differing from normal display, a selection ratio of timing for executing a display mode change differs. Extracted numerical data are stored in a temporary storage area (for example, each register), and then the numerical data stored in the temporary storage area are stored as holding storage. Based on the numerical data stored in the temporary storage area, it is determined (read-ahead determination) whether control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a typical gaming machine of this type, a variable display is performed. For example, when a display result is a specific display result (a jackpot symbol), the game machine is configured to be controlled to an advantageous state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. Is known. In this type of gaming machine, the variable display that has not yet been started in the variable display is stored as the hold storage, and the hold storage is displayed as the hold display.

  Some of these conventional gaming machines execute an effect of changing the display mode of one hold display in a plurality of stages (Patent Document 1).

JP2011-212304A (paragraph number 0418 etc.)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a lack of interest in the game, for example, there is no relationship between the mode of holding display and the change timing of holding display for effects that change in a plurality of stages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game with respect to changes in the mode of the hold display.

(1) A gaming machine that displays a change and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
Numerical data (for example, random value MR1 for determining special figure display result, jackpot type determination) when a game medium (for example, game ball) passes through the start area (for example, first start winning opening, second start winning opening) Extraction means (for example, a part for executing step S217 in the game control microcomputer 100) for extracting the random number value MR2 for use, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category),
After the numerical data extracted by the extraction means is stored in the temporary storage area (for example, each register included in the game control microcomputer 100), the numerical value stored in the temporary storage area for the variable display that has not yet started. Reservation storage means for storing data as a retention storage (first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second starting winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) When,
On-hold display means (image display device 5, RAM 102, first start-winning memory display area 5HL, second start-winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) capable of displaying the on-hold memory stored in the on-hold storage means as a hold display (hold display, etc.) )When,
Fluctuation corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, etc.) capable of performing fluctuation corresponding display (active display etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation display during execution of the fluctuation display,
Decision means for deciding whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part for executing step S240 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Determination means (for example, a part for executing step S403 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination means determines;
The hold display mode change (change during hold display in FIG. 43) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and the change display mode is changed during the execution of the change display. A change corresponding display mode change (change during active display in FIG. 44) to be performed is selected from among a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage. Display mode changing means (production control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, icon production setting processing in FIG. 45, S172 in FIG. 22 and the like) that can be executed at any timing of
The determination means determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the numerical data stored in the temporary storage area (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the value in the register in step S403). The stored special figure display result determination random number value MR1 is used to determine whether or not a big hit will occur),
The display mode changing means includes a first specific display (character icon display in FIG. 41A) and a second specific display (character icon display in FIG. 41B) in which the display type of the change target is different from the normal display. ), The selection ratio of the timing for executing the display mode change is different (as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the character icon display is the change effect execution ratio during the hold display). In the character icon display, the change effect execution rate is high during active display, and the rate at which the display mode actually changes during execution of the change effect is during the hold display as shown in FIGS. Therefore, depending on whether the character icon display or the character icon display is used, the display mode of the icon is different between the hold display and the active display. Different frequency of reduction, the rate of selecting or changing a display form in either an in active display and pending display are different.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change for the hold display mode change and the change display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
Fluctuation display execution means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the fluctuation display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure) and the fluctuation display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure). Steps S110 to S113)
Data used when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, big hit flag, small hit flag, big hit type) A common storage area (for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 and the game control buffer setting unit 155) is provided as the storage area of the buffer value (for example, steps S242, S245, and S247 in the controlled microcomputer 100). Part to execute).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the necessary storage area by using the data storage area in common.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect (for example, a graphic group in the first system change effect) that is executed in common when the mode of the variable response display is changed and when the mode of the variable response display is not changed. The effects before Y1 collides with the active display, the effects until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display in the second system change effect, etc. Successful effect of changing the display mode (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect of changing to the star display mode when any of the figures “star” in the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display, In the system change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are displayed. An effect that is executed to change the display mode such as active display or active display frame) or a failure effect that does not change the variation-corresponding display mode (for example, in the first system change effect, any one of the graphic group Y1 in the active display) In the effect that the display form of the active display is not changed by the disappearance of the figure of the shape “star” and the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame. The active display frame line thickness is not changed, and the first system change effect and the second system change effect are both executed, and the display mode of one or both of the active display frame and the active display frame is not changed. Production execution means capable of performing production etc.),
Of the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display, the ratio of executing the successful rendering differs depending on at which timing the common rendering is performed.

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the common performance. In addition, the player's expectation can be improved by paying attention to the execution timing.

(4) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (3),
Regarding the hold display, it is possible to display one of the first specific display and the second specific display and then change the display to the other (for example, the display mode of the hold display is a character icon). Description of modification etc. which change from display to character icon display).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the specific display or the change in the type of the specific display, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (4),
The first change effect suggesting the change of the hold display mode (FIGS. 26B and 26C, and the change display effect during hold display in which an arrow acts on the hold display as shown in FIG. 42) and the variation correspondence The second change effect suggesting the display mode change (FIGS. 26B and 26C and the active display change effect in which an arrow acts on the active display as shown in FIG. 42) is selected. Change effect means (effect control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, S172 in FIG. 22, etc.) that can be executed by
The change effect means has a different ratio of changing the display mode for each of the first change effect and the second change effect (for the change display effect during the hold display, when the big hit in FIGS. 26 (F) and (H)). The non-change determination ratio is different between the first change effect and the second change effect, and the non-change determination ratio at the time of big hit in FIGS. 26 (J) and (L) is different between the third change effect and the fourth change effect. 26 (G) and (I) regarding the change effect during active display, the ratio of no change at the time of big hit differs between the first change effect and the second change effect, and FIGS. The ratio of no change at the time of big hit is different between the third change effect and the fourth change effect.) Multiple types of change effects (the first change effect and the second change effect regarding the change display during the hold display, or the third change effect) Change effect and fourth change effect.Active In the case of a character effect display as shown in FIG. 42, a change effect selected from the first change effect and the second change effect, or the third change effect and the fourth change effect, etc. An effect mode of a change effect selected from the first change effect and the second change effect during the hold display or the active display, and in the case of the character icon display, the third change effect and the fourth change effect during the hold display or the active display. The change effect is produced by the change effect selected from the change effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode of the hold display mode change or the change correspondence display mode change, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (5),
For each of the first specific display and the second specific display, the selection ratio is high when a timing having a lower selection ratio is selected from among the first timing and the second timing included in the plurality of timings. Compared to when the timing is selected, the rate at which the expectation level for the player changes to a display mode that is greater than or equal to a predetermined level (for example, the display of character icons is as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C). In addition, although the ratio of selecting the display mode change of the character icon during active display is lower than that during hold display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (I), during active display, In comparison, “high heat” display having a high level of expectation of jackpot is selected as a character icon display after the display mode is changed, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay more attention to the change mode of the hold display by the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example etc. of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning in an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows an on-hold selection time production pattern table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system | strain change effect execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the said display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows a change production pattern table. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a hold display in an image display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the production | presentation display example of the active display after displaying a character icon as a hold display in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an icon production setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which selects the execution timing of the display mode change effect during hold display from several timings.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening as a start area (first start area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. Further, a winning when the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls is based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first starting win). Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) and a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed in the image display device 5 is satisfied. Further, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting win). If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure holding memory number (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display device 4B executes the second. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed in the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second start prize may be the same or different.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  Information about variable display corresponding to the first start winning that the first starting condition by the first starting winning is satisfied but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  Information related to variable display corresponding to the second start prize in which the second start condition by the second start prize has been established but the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize has not been established. Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is established. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when there is no particular distinction between the first start prize and the second start prize, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. Further, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number”. When it is referred to as “the number of memories”, it may indicate any one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and is changed into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, in a variable manner (referred to as variable display or variable display). To do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each symbol number “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and symbol “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. Good. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. A variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Information relating to a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general-purpose hold display unit 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) based on, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition permitting the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as illustrated in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5 (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R), the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game), A finalized symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image showing an arbitrary figure. Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the symbol. As an example, each of the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8” may be given the symbol numbers “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and any number may be used (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  A stop display that stops the variable display by stopping the fixed special symbol that is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and a final symbol symbol that is a variable symbol display result (final stop symbol) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of normal symbol (also referred to as the normal map display result) It is also referred to as a stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). It should be noted that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, It is sufficient if the fluctuation time falls.

  That is, the decorative symbol variation start timing may be later than the special symbol variation start timing, and the special symbol variation end timing (determined special symbol stop display timing) is the decorative symbol variation end timing (definite decorative symbol stop It may be later than (display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern having a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped while causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  Note that in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). An indication may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  In the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). An indication may be added.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) A special image representing information including active display (also referred to as fluctuation display, digestion display, current display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information is displayed. Active display area AHA (variable display area, digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active A stop display area, an active display area, a current display area, a current display area, a display unit during digestion, etc.) are, for example, between the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR. Has been placed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display such as characters and images displayed around the active display frame, and the active display frame Information or the like corresponding to is displayed as a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. . At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided at a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch for stopping the driving of the shooting motor provided in the hitting ball shooting device and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. upper tray (hitting supply tray) is provided for. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided at the lower part of the frame 3 for the gaming machine.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like may be built in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to comprise including a photosensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message) or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. The sound, voice, etc. that give notice or suggestion that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is placed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 may include other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, and a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The big prize opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit, the execution of the rounds may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening).

  Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of executions of the round may be a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 second etc.) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is different from the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  In this way, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Advantages advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability variation state (high probability state), a short time state, and a high base state, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state.

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state refers to a decorative symbol (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the production operation in the reach production, a plurality of types of production patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”) may be varied. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the jackpot) / {(probability of the effect to be executed at the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) + (other than the time of the big hit) (Probability that the effect will be executed) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expected degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during decorative display of decorative symbols, as one aspect of variable display effects, slip effects, pseudo-continuous effects, and the like realized by variable display operations such as decorative symbols can be executed. In the sliding effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then in a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) An effect display is performed in which the decorative symbol to be stopped is changed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again in one or both of the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance eye is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) Temporarily displayed), then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display that starts variable display of all decorative symbols, is performed a predetermined number of times ( (For example, up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display) number of times (one time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (final variable display), and re-variability between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2) are grasped. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as the first pseudo-ream, the second variable display (first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also referred to as the second pseudo-ream and the third time. The variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to the fourth temporary stop display is the fourth. It is also called a pseudo-ream Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. Increasing the number of times of the first, second, third,...

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, and after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is simulated. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the consecutive chances are temporarily stopped. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) may be a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. . Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation level of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, display of a background image, display of a message window, There may be a device that uses an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, and extinguishing).

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect is common when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. Includes common effects performed in The notice effect includes a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect. Note that the notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. The suggestion effect may be an effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, similarly to the common effect. In other words, when the effect that suggests that the common effect is executed is referred to as the suggestion effect, and the effect that suggests that either the success effect or the failure effect is executed (the common effect or the common effect) Another production) may be referred to as a suggestion production.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  The notice effects may include those that become pre-read notice effects (also referred to as “preliminary notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball, It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the definite decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL. Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, or the second start win memory display area 5HR Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal symbol of the same type (also referred to as “non-probability variable symbol”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination of the final stop display. As an example of the normal symbol, among the eight types of decorative symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative symbols having even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” It is.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the predetermined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed.

  By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, etc., among a plurality of types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination May be displayed in a stopped manner. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. May be. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which the same kind of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and are finally stopped and displayed. An example of a probabilistic design is the four types of decorative symbols with odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” among the eight types of decorative symbols with symbol numbers “1” to “8”. It is.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the probability variation control may be terminated when it is determined that “the probability variation falls” is to be finished in the probability variation falling lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended. .

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing the game longer than that in the normal state and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game whose variable display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination, it is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbol is aligned, The decorative symbol (probability variation symbol) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is a normal jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state During the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, the period from the end of the last round until the next variable display game is started, etc., during the jackpot promotion that will be a probable change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state An effect may be executed. A notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as a display operation in the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speaker 8 or a part thereof, and a lighting operation / light-off operation in the lamp 9 or the like. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit to perform is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing display control of these is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decoration symbol variably displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the stored storage information, a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying command for designating whether the start winning prize is given to the first starting prize opening or the second winning prize opening is designated. In addition to transmission, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. Whether or not “small hit” is determined. If “big hit” is determined, the big hit type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, the change category can be recognized based on the value set in the change category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 is provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 is provided.

  As an example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 performs various data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading data, receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  As variation patterns including reach effects such as big hit variation patterns and reach variation patterns, variation patterns corresponding to the reach aspects of the respective reach effects are prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In FIG. 5, the description of the fluctuation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit fluctuation pattern and the big hit fluctuation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and jackpot variation pattern (except when the jackpot type is abrupt).

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, Data constituting a table as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special figure game (special game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table 130B A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “30000” to “30350”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, since the “special hit” is not achieved in the second special figure game, for example, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B such as a short-time state (low-accuracy base state) or a probability variation state (high-accuracy high-base state) is formed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” that makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended game. .

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, determination values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display results. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller decision value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Or you may determine a special figure display result with reference to a common special figure display result determination table with a 1st special figure game and a 2nd special figure game.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprising change” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined range of determination values ( When the second special figure game is executed while the variable special figure is the second special figure, the value in the range of “82” to “99” is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. No decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “Accuracy”. With such a setting, the game is not “accurate” in the second special figure game, so that it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable prize-winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the extended game.

  It should be noted that the determined values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of “probability” in a gaming state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to common table data in the case where the variation special chart is the first special chart and the second special chart.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determined values (for example, a range or number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flag). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as reserved data (first special figure reservation information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. A second reserved memory number count value that is a stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, a total reserved memory number count value that is a stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, and the like. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120 Random number which updates the numerical data which shows a random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for effect control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the change data, and the effect control CPU 120 the RAM 122. The fluctuation data reading operation for reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the stage, the effect control CPU 120 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL to be one of a plurality of types. Yes. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute a hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold effect is executed is determined for each of whether the hold effect is not executed and is executed. Assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to the notice mode, and is displayed in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. This is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display form of the held display to the notice form. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change gaze effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, with or without execution of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing a special image into a notice mode. In other words, active display and, or an active display frame surrounding the active display, information corresponding to the active display (e.g., text, images, etc. are displayed around the active display or active display and around the active display frame) or the like to notice aspects It is an effect to change (main notice effect). The active display change effect, as described above, and common effect, a successful effect to be executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect (also called active display change effect) was performed common effect A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gas effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, failure effect, in the display area of the image display device 5 does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image effect, or, acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 has a special image This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the mode of the special image into one of a plurality of modes and a change of the special image in the second system. And the 2nd system | strain change effect changed to either of several aspects is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. There are common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is in the special image. The display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) is changed.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores the first system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects. An effect execution timing determination table is stored. This first system change effect differs in the rate at which the successful effect related to the first system change effect is executed depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Also, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the first system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of first system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all first system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores the second system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing of the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. This second system change effect differs in the rate at which the successful effect related to the second system change effect is executed depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. The ROM 121 also stores a plurality of second system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the second system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  The ROM 121 includes a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, their respective determination ratios, and the like are different from each other. An effect execution timing determination table for effects and an execution timing determination table for second system change effects may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. The active display change effect execution timing determination table includes a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect at each execution timing, and the second system. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (determined value) to be compared may be assigned. Also, instead of a plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of all active display change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good.

  The ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an active display change effect effect pattern (effect mode) as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the active display change effect effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a random value (not shown) for determining the active display change effect effect pattern for each of the active display change effect effect patterns. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as the number of changes to be executed). In addition, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. The hold change effect execution timing determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect for each execution timing. Further, instead of a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the main notice effect other than the active display change effect described above. It may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables having different types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the main notice effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern may be assigned to each main notice effect pattern. Instead of a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, if the ROM 121 is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern to each of the hold change effect patterns in the hold change effect pattern determination table. Good.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution presence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the hold change effect effect. In this case, in the pending change gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to hold the change change gaze effect is executed. A decision value) may be assigned.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the change change effect effect (timing of how many changes will be executed later). In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change change effect execution timing determination table. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gaze effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change gaze effect execution timing determination table. It should be noted that instead of a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables, one large change change effect effect execution timing determination table including information on all hold change effect display timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a pending change gasset effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending change gasset effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the pending change gaze effect pattern for each of the pending change gaze effect patterns in the pending change gaze effect pattern determination table. May be assigned.

  The ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table. In the display mode determination table for active display, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode of active display may be assigned to each of the display modes of active display. That is, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes different from each other in the determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display display modes. A determination table may be stored. Instead of a plurality of active display display mode determination tables, one large active display display mode determination table including information of all active display display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the effect model, etc.). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are configured by data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation of symbols, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as an effect and a hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR), and the like.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like may be set in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control, etc. may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed to determine the content of the effect by accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the effective period. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the rendering operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is performed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the ROM 121 of pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern. The storage address may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command. One command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (command associated with the first start opening prize designation command) However, the shift is made while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command. One command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (command associated with the second start opening winning designation command) However, the shift is made while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the prefetch preview buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, the contents of the determination concerning the prefetching notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the 2 prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Hereinafter, step S is simply referred to as S. Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of tilting movement of blades.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing to the off state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 11 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S208 and S211 in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. If the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; No), or when the number of first special figure reservation storage reaches the upper limit in S202 (S202; Yes), the process of S209 is executed. Thereafter, whether or not the second start port switch 22B is turned on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Is determined (S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number (the holding number of the second special figure game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in S204 (S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” (S210).

  After the process of S207 is executed, a start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (S209), and the process proceeds to S203. After the process of S210 is executed, a start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (S212), and the start winning determination process is terminated. . Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (S208, S211), the CPU 103 updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value stored in the start port buffer by 1 (S215 in FIG. 14). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of S215, the total pending storage number is updated to be incremented by 1 (S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of S216, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determining Are extracted and stored in each register of the game control microcomputer 100 (S217). In this embodiment, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a register for storing a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining a variation category. General purpose registers B to D provided are used. For example, the CPU 103 stores the extracted random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result in the general purpose register B, stores the extracted random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type in the general purpose register C, and determines the extracted variation category. The random value MR3 is stored in the general-purpose register D. Next, numerical data indicating each random number value stored in each register is stored by being set as holding information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure holding storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (S218). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  Following the process of S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  As the winning random number determination process (S220), the CPU 103 checks the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by confirming the state of the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example. It is identified (S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing of S401, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the starting port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current game The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the state is selected (S402). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, in S217 in FIG. 14, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the register (for example, the general-purpose register B) is extracted, and the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result Is determined to be within a predetermined jackpot determination range (S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the process of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 decides each random number MR1 and each decision value. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 extracted from the register in the step S403 is within a predetermined small hit determination range. Determine (S404). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of S402. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (S404; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S405).

  If it is determined in S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (S407).

  When it is determined in S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (S403; Yes), the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the register (for example, the general register C) is extracted, and the extracted jackpot type The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determination (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result in the process of S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (S410).

  After performing any of the processes of S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 determines that there are a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, different determination ratios, and the like). ) To select one of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of S403 or S404, etc.), the reserved memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Or the like, the variable category determination table to be set as the use table is selected. Subsequently, the CPU 103 extracts the variation category determination table set as the use table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category stored in the register (for example, the general-purpose register D), and extracts the extracted variation category. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, one of the variation categories is determined from among a plurality of types of variation categories.

  As described above, in this embodiment, (1) at the time of starting winning, the random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted and stored in each register in step S217, and (2) in step S218, each register (temporary storage area) is stored. The stored random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as hold information in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value. Then, (3) using the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in each register (temporary storage area) in the winning random number determination processing in step S220, which is executed thereafter, in steps S403, S404, S409, and S412. Whether a big hit or a small hit is made, a big hit type, and a variation category are determined (so-called prefetch determination). In this embodiment, as described above, since the determination is made using the random value stored in each register (temporary storage area) in the prefetch determination, the random number value stored as the hold information in the special figure hold storage unit 151 As compared with the case of determining by reading out, it is possible to speed up the process of prefetch determination.

  In this embodiment, the case of executing the prefetch determination process of (3) after the process of storing the hold information of (2) is shown. However, the processing order is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. . For example, after executing the prefetch determination process of (3), the process of storing the hold information of (2) may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the temporary storage area is a register included in the game control microcomputer 100. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is stored in the temporary storage area dedicated to the prefetch determination provided in the RAM 102 so that a temporary storage area dedicated to the prefetch determination is provided separately from the special figure storage unit 151. The prefetch determination process may be performed using a random number value.

  Further, in this embodiment, the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the respective registers, but each register stores the random number values only during the period after the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored and before the prefetch determination processing is performed. MR1 to MR3 may be temporarily stored, or random number values MR1 to MR3 stored for a certain period of time may be held after the prefetch determination processing.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of the variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIG. 17A to FIG. This is a selection example in which one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 17A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the variable category. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variable category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variable category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 17C, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category. “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”, and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIG. 17A to FIG. 17C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance that at least the reach is not achieved.

  After that, according to the determination result (determination result) in the process of S412, a setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 is performed (S413). The winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. To do.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of a special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. The process etc. which measure is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, It is a first special figure game (special game using the first special figure) by the special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure game (special drawing using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether it is a game. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S112 may be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special game or the second special game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). The process to set for is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set according to whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, the big win type corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” is set to “29 seconds” as the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened, and the upper prize is the upper limit of the number of rounds By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In this case, processing for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. And a process for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process of S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end processing of S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. The processing to do is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of S231, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S231 (S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores special data as the storage data corresponding to the reservation number “1”. The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit In 151B, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S233). In the process of S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. .

  As described above, since the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure holding memory number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game Is held, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And special drawing games (first special drawing game, second special drawing game) may be executed in the order in which the starting prizes (first starting prize, second starting prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S235 (S235; No), the special data is stored as special data stored in the first special figure storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Numeric data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory unit is updated. In 151A, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S237). In the process of S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (S238).

  After executing either of the processes of S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is “big hit” or “losing”, FIG. Similarly to the process of S402 shown in (A), special table display result determination table data is selected (S239). That is, in the process of S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S239, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” (S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the jackpot types is a plurality of types (S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember me. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  If it is determined in S241 that it is not “big hit” (S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S247).

  When it is determined in S246 that it is not “small hit” (S246; No), or after executing any of the processes of S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state in advance A determined special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S248, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. If the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in S235 (S235; Yes), the predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (S250), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. To do. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S242 and S247 is executed, so that the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are set to the on state, and the processing of step S245 is executed. As a result, the big hit type buffer value is set in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Thus, in this embodiment, with respect to the hold information, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B are provided separately, whereas the big hit flag and the small hit flag For the data used when executing the variable display such as the jackpot type buffer value, the common storage area (the book) is used when the variable display of the first special figure is executed and when the variable display of the second special figure is executed. In the example, a game control flag setting unit 152 and a game control buffer setting unit 155) are provided. Therefore, regarding the data used at the time of executing the variable display, the necessary storage area can be reduced by using the data storage area in common.

  In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the variation pattern determining variation from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

  As described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, the determination corresponding to the same variation category When the random number value MR3 that matches the value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories differs greatly between when the winning random number determination process (S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (S111) is executed. In the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as the winning random number determination process is determined. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”, the winning is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined in both the random time value determination process and the fluctuation pattern setting process. For example, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process. Is done. In the process of S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly extracts the variation category determination random value MR3. Alternatively, the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequently, using the newly extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category, the CPU 103 determines the variation category as in S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, a variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. And the variation category is determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern determination table to be set as a use table from among a plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, based on the variation category that is the determination result. Subsequently, based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern from among a plurality of types of variation patterns. decide.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 19A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 (S219). ), Transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in S403, S404, S409, etc. is performed (S405, S407, S410), and according to the variation category determined in S412 Transmission setting for transmitting the variable category command (S413) is performed, and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (S221).

  After these processes are executed, the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command Four commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing of S110, a fixed special symbol which becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, etc. In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, etc. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are performed. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, a variable display result notification command, a variation pattern designation command, etc. are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in batch. Note that the commands are not limited to being transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process of S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” or “small bonus” in the special symbol normal processing (S110). Whether or not to control to the small hit game state is determined, a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative design is determined in the variation pattern setting process (S111), and each effect control command The content determined by is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a “big hit” or “small” is determined by the random number value determination process at winning (S220). Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state as a “winning”, a determination of a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative design, etc. is performed, and is determined by each production control command The contents are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S72; No), the process of S72 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in S72 (S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S73), and command analysis processing is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read out and then read out. Settings and control corresponding to the production control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in S74, the effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process in S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are used. With respect to the control content of the effect operation used, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of S75, an effect random number update process is executed (S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random values used for effect control. Numeric data is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to S72. The various random number values updated in S76 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 to MR12, in addition to a random number for determining a fixed symbol, which will be described later.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S74 of FIG. 20 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (S501). At this time, if there is no received command (S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in S501 (S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize designation command (S502). . If it is the first start opening winning designation command (S502; Yes), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (S503). For example, in the processing of S503, if a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 Good.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in S502 (S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (S504). When the command is the second start opening winning designation command (S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the processing of S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command in S504 (S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in S507 (S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S509).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage count notification command in S508 (S508; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage count notification command (S510). If the command is the second pending storage count notification command (S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

  When the received command is a symbol designating command at S506 (S506; Yes), when the received command is a variable category command at S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511 is executed. After that, in the process of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set, the received command is received at the first start winning received command buffer 194A. (S512), the process returns to the process of S501.

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511 When the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command after the execution of the received command, the received command is received at the second start winning received command. After storing at the head of the empty area in the buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first change start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in S510 (S510; No), after setting according to other received commands (S513), the process returns to S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, and each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, and each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S150 of FIG. 22 as the winning effect determination process.

  In the winning effect determining process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). It is checked (S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start port winning designation command is received as a new received command (S152). When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (S152; No), the contents stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B are checked (S153), and a new received command is obtained. It is determined whether a second start opening winning designation command has been received (S153). When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (S154; No), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (S152; Yes), if it is specified that the time is not short in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155). : NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. When executing a hold change effect or a hold change gasse effect for a hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed in this step. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a hold | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines NO is determined, when it determines to perform a hold | maintenance effect.

  First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 24A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 24B shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows setting of a display mode determination ratio of a hold display by a hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 24D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 24E shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” is selected from the above seven types. 24 is an example of setting the aspect ratio (H-TBL5), and Fig. 24 (F) shows a hold selected when the variation category "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" is selected from the above seven types. Fig. 24G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the display mode determination ratio of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and Fig. 24G illustrates the variation category "PB5 (super It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when

  According to FIG. 24, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G), but the types of display modes to be determined are the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, It is roughly divided into three types, the second specific display mode. The normal display mode is “sphere”. The first specific display mode is a display mode (also referred to as a character icon) of an icon shape using “character”. The second specific display mode is a display mode of an icon shape (also referred to as a character icon) using a “character” composed of “human character”. Examples of “spheres” are shown in FIGS. 29A-36B. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. Icon-like hold displays such as “character icons” and “character icons” are used for production as hold displays of a specific display form of a type different from the normal display form of a general “sphere”.

  In the on-hold display mode determination table of FIG. 24, when the on-hold display of the on-hold storage to be determined is determined to be the display mode of the character icon, a display mode of a predetermined character icon (for example, an on-appearance display consisting of the characters “caution”) After the appearance of the hold display in the mode), either the hold display mode change effect or the fluctuation corresponding display mode change effect may be executed in response to the hold storage in which the hold display is made. The on-hold display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character changes during the on-hold display after the on-hold display by the character icon appears in the normal display mode (for example, “attention”) This is an effect that suggests that the character in the normal display mode changes to the character in the specific display mode of “opportunity” or “hot”. The variation corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect suggesting that the display mode of the character icon similarly changes during the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon (during display in the active display area AHA). It is. The hold display mode change effect and the variation-corresponding display mode change effect may be collectively referred to as a display mode change effect. A specific example of the hold display mode change effect by the character icon and the change corresponding display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the table of FIG. 24, when the hold display of the target hold storage is determined as the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is performed in the display mode of the predetermined character icon (for example, the display mode when appearing consisting of one character). After the appearance, either the hold display mode change effect or the fluctuation corresponding display mode change effect may be executed in response to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed. The on-hold display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect (for example, one character) suggesting that the display mode of the character changes during the on-hold display after the on-screen display by the character icon appears in the normal display mode. This is an effect suggesting a change from the normal display mode to the specific display mode of two characters or three characters). The variation corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the character icon similarly changes during the active display corresponding to the hold display, for example. A specific example of the hold display mode change effect by the character icon and the change corresponding display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The “sphere” hold display shows “red sphere”, “yellow sphere”, “blue sphere”, and “white sphere” in each table of FIG. In the hold display of “sphere”, for example, in the case of reach, red and yellow are more easily determined than in the case of non-reach, and blue and white (initial color) are less likely to be determined. In addition, in the case of reaching, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is difficult to determine blue and white compared to when reaching hot (for example, super reach) and not reach (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 16, 17, and 24, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “losing”. The white color is difficult to determine. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation level for a hot performance and a big hit than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot performance is executed and the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit are high.

  The display mode of the suspension display of the character icon is displayed as “character” in each table of FIG. When it is determined as “character”, the newly added hold display is set as the display mode of the character icon (normal display mode), and the hold as described above corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed. Either the display mode change effect or the fluctuation corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

  The display mode of the character icon hold display is displayed as “character character” in each table of FIG. When it is determined to be “character”, the newly added hold display is set as the character icon display mode (normal display mode), and the above-described hold display corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed. Either the display mode change effect or the fluctuation corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

  According to the table of FIG. 24, as understood with reference to the determination ratio of the random number MR6, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot, the higher the variation display, the longer the display with the character icon or the display with the character icon is selected. The ratio is high. In this example, the higher the degree of expectation that is a big hit, the higher the percentage of the reserved display by the character icon selected than the reserved display by the character icon.

  In the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 uses the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11 to store the plurality of hold display mode determination tables shown in FIG. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected, and a hold is additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of display (display mode when added) is determined. As a result, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL is determined as one of “sphere”, “character icon”, and “character icon”. ", The color is determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determining process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determining process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determining process (S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize received command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process for the hold display of “sphere”, and determines to execute the hold change effect. Received command buffer at the time of first start winning corresponding to the determination contents of the determination process (execution timing when executing the hold change effect, execution timing when executing the hold change effect effect, execution timing when executing the hold change effect) In association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in 194A, the determination contents of the hold effect determination process (information (for example, flag) indicating that the hold change effect is executed, the hold change gasset effect) Information indicating execution (for example, flag), information indicating execution of pending change (for example, flag)), and target Information (for example, corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) specifying the hold display changed by the hold effect (ie, the hold display by the first start winning) as the stop display The first prefetch preview buffer 194C buffer number) may be stored.

  In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold memory number 3, the additional display mode “white”, the hold effect “executed (hold change effect executed) When the execution timing is determined as “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). ”) Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number“ 3 ”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, and the first corresponding to the execution timing“ next variation ”is stored. The buffer number (buffer number) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning prize It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process for the hold display of “sphere”, the first start corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process In association with the buffer number of the first look-ahead preview buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in the winning reception command buffer 194A, only the information specifying the target hold display (hold display by the first start win) is stored. (It is not necessary to store information indicating that the hold change effect is executed.)

  After executing the process of S161, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determining process (S160) (the first start winning buffer in the first start winning received command buffer 194A). The first hold addition for adding a new hold display to the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number The process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  In S154, it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command is received (S154; Yes), and when it is specified that the time is short in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S156: YES) ), The second hold effect determination process is executed (S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process for determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR. Thereby, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR is determined as one of “sphere”, “character icon”, and “character icon”. ", The color is determined. In addition, in the case of executing a hold change effect or a hold change gaze effect for a hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a holding | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines NO is determined, when it determines to perform a holding | maintenance effect.

  Each process of S163, S164, and S165 related to the second start opening prize is the same as the process related to each process of S160, S161, and S162 related to the first start opening prize, and “first” in each step. "Is replaced with" second ", and the code can be replaced in accordance with the replacement, and the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: YES), The CPU 120 for effect control determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL as the initial color (white), and uses the stored content in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. In association with the same buffer number as the corresponding buffer number, the first hold display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  In S154, it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command is received (S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is not short in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S156: YES) ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR as the normal display (white ball), and the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content, the second hold display in the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR (S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  After the winning effect determination process of S150 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, the following S170 to 177 are performed. Select one of the processes and execute it.

  The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first change start command (or second change start command), a change pattern designation command, a change display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 Active to shift the first hold display or the second hold display, to determine the fixed decorative pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effects of various effects (for example, active display as a main notice effect) It includes a process for determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The effect process during variable display in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of decorative symbols during variable display of decorative symbols) are performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data, and displays the effect signal on the screen. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control for outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, corresponding to the fact that an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the effect control pattern, or that a symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the fixed decorative design is displayed in a completely stopped state in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and changes in S172. Similarly to the effect processing during display, various effect control in the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, a sound effect signal, an electrical decoration signal, or the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and the variable of S172 Similarly to the effect processing during display, various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in S172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, or the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process of S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set content, and the variable display effect in S172 Similar to the processing, various kinds of effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated fluctuation pattern is changed. This is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, “PA2-3” in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not (S523).

  When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S523; Yes), a combination of a definite decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination is determined (S524). As an example, in the process of S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Note that, in the process of S524, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the change symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (S525). As an example, in the process of S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left / right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols. The decorative design with the same number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the medium finalized decorative symbol, the final decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display result is “ It is determined whether it is a “small hit” or other cases (S526). When it is determined to be “Accuracy” or “Small Hit” (S526; Yes), for example, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or “Small Hit”, such as an opening chance. Is determined (S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. And the like, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined.

  When it is determined in S526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “surprise accuracy” or “small hit” (S526; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (S528). As an example, in the process of S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and then a predetermined value stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table The decorative design with the same number is determined. At this time, a determination may be made that a different decorative symbol is a final decorative symbol depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the plural types of normal symbols is selected and determined as the definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect etc. during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  If it is specified that the time is not short in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (S155: NO), after executing any of the processing of S524, S525, S527, or S528, the pending digest processing is executed. (S531). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the variation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the variation is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the process of S531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 starts the other hold display for the first start. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR.

  After executing the process of S531, an effect execution setting process is executed (S532). The effect execution setting process (S532) includes a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change when the hold display is determined to be “sphere”. The process of determining the type of active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect when executed, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executed, and the results of these processes A process for setting (or resetting) the production control pattern based on this is included.

  Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the newly appearing hold display is determined to be a display form of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon, a display form change effect execution timing selection process, It further includes a display mode change effect type selection process, an icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, a process for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the processing results, and the like.

  The display mode change effect execution timing selection processing is the execution timing of the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) corresponding to the hold storage in which the character icon or the icon shape of the character icon is held on hold. Is a process of selecting and determining As shown in FIGS. 26B, 26C, etc., the execution timing of such hold display is, for example, during hold display after the first hold display shift after the hold display corresponding to the hold storage appears. And the timing during active display corresponding to the reserved storage are selected and determined.

  The display mode change effect type selection processing selects and determines the type of display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) of the “character” or “character” icon shape display or active display. It is processing. As shown in FIGS. 26D, 26E, etc., the type of display mode change effect is selected and determined as one of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

  In the change mode selection process, the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) of the display of the “character” or “character” icon shape display is selected and determined. It is processing. As shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M), the display modes of the character icon display mode change effect (the hold display mode change effect or the change corresponding display mode change effect) are “no change” and “opportunity” display. And “Intense heat” are selected and determined. The display mode change effect of the character icon (the hold display mode change effect or the variation-corresponding display mode change effect) is selected and determined from among “no change”, “two people” display, and “three people” display. The

  After executing the processing of S532, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (S533). As an example, in the processing of S533, execution setting of “single notification effect” that immediately notifies (definitely notifies) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission may be performed. . Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Moreover, in the process of S533, you may set so that the production | presentation of a predetermined aspect may be performed, for example for liveliness, regardless of whether a variable display result turns into "big hit". For example, you may set so that the effect of the aspect which a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, light emission member 9SL, 9SR) light-emits is performed.

  After executing the processing of S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (S534). Subsequently, a change display start setting process for setting the start of the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (S535). For example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The sound output from the speaker 8 is output by transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13 or the like for starting the variation of the decorative design on the screen 5. The setting for starting, the setting for starting the light emission in the lamp 9 is performed by transmitting an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14.

  After executing the processing of S535, the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 194B is digested (S536). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (first set entry prize designation command) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command is deleted while deleting the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number. The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the received command buffer at the second start winning prize. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the command, shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  In the processing of S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first prefetching preview buffer 194C or the second prefetching preview buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed in accordance with the command deletion or shift. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S537), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an on-hold selection effect pattern table. In particular, FIG. 26A shows a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. FIGS. 26B to 26M show a display mode change effect execution timing selection process and a display mode change effect type selection when the hold display is determined to be an icon-shaped display mode such as a character icon or a character icon. It is various data tables used for the icon production | presentation setting process which performs a process and a change mode selection process.

  Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 26A, whether or not the active display change effect is executed when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, and the type of active display change effect (which It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | generation aspect of an active display change effect when performing an active display change effect). In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with a random number MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect are “executed” and “not executed”. Are assigned at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In the “execution present” in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determination is “first system change effect” and “ Each of the “second system change effect” and the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is assigned at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame, The target which acts by the 2nd system change production differs.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is a fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 26A, when the variation patterns (variable display patterns) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command are the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, “No execution” is performed. "Is 100%, indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (losing), it indicates that the active display change effect is not executed.

  Further, when the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X Compared to a certain case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change is “big hit” is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the loss occurs in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of determining “first system change effect and second system change effect” when “execution present” is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 57% (40 ÷ 70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 33% (10 ÷ 30). It is. Alternatively, more specifically, whether the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is any of the variation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or any of the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined by the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specifying command is the change pattern PA3-X to PA5-. It is larger than the difference in the ratio at which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of X is the variation pattern PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when the variation pattern is PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined, and when the variation pattern is PA3-X, “first system change effect and second system change effect”. While the difference from the ratio at which the “production” is determined is 30% (40% −10%), the ratio and the fluctuation pattern at which the “first system change effect” is determined when the variation pattern PB3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which the “first system change effect” is determined for PA3-X is 5% (15% -10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of being a “big hit” is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when super reach is reached in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when normal reach is set in the change. In other words, when the active display change effect is executed, the expectation level for super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation for super reach is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  FIG. 26 (B) is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. In FIG. 26 (B), the selection of the relationship that the random value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is “pending display> active display” is selected at two types of display mode change effect timings during hold display and active display. Allocated as a percentage.

  FIG. 26C is a character presentation display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. In FIG. 26 (C), the random number MR10 for selecting the display mode change effect timing is selected at a selection ratio of the relationship “hold display <active display” at two types of change effect timings during hold display and active display. Allocated.

  According to FIG. 26 (B) and FIG. 26 (C), when the hold display is in the character icon display mode, the hold display is more active than the character icon display mode. Also, the rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio that the display mode change effect is executed in the active display than in the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon Is expensive. Thereby, the player is focused on the display type (for example, the display type of character icon and character icon) to be changed in the display mode change effect and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of holding display and active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  As for the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M) to be described later, the ratio of the actual change of the display mode after the execution of the display mode change effect is the hold display. Equal to medium and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display display change effect is higher in the hold display than in the active display, compared to when the character icon display mode, When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display mode change effect is higher in the active display than in the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon Based on whether the hold display is displayed in the character icon display or the character icon display, the frequency of the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display, The ratio for selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the hold display and the active display. Thereby, about the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to changes in the game.

  FIG. 26D is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. As a kind of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as a blue effect) and the first change effect 42, a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or active display (sometimes referred to as a red effect) and is provided so as to be selectable. The first change effect and the second change effect are different in the selection ratio of the icon display change mode after execution of the display mode change effect. For example, the second change effect (red effect) is the first change effect (blue effect). ) Is set to be higher in the selection ratio of the change mode having a higher expectation level that is a big hit (see FIGS. 26F to 26I). In FIG. 26 (D), the random number MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the first change effect and the second change effect at a selection ratio of “first change effect = second change effect”. It has been.

  FIG. 26E is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. As a type of display mode change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as a blue effect). An effect and a fourth change effect in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on hold display or active display (sometimes referred to as a red effect) are provided so as to be selectable. The third change effect and the fourth change effect have different selection ratios of icon display change modes after execution of the display mode change effect. For example, the fourth change effect (red effect) has a third change effect (blue effect). ) Is set to be higher in the selection ratio of the change mode having a higher expectation level that is a big hit (see FIGS. 26J to 26M). In FIG. 26E, the random number MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the third change effect and the fourth change effect at a selection ratio of the relationship “third change effect = fourth change effect”. It has been.

  26 (F) to 26 (I) show the display mode change effect timing and the display mode selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (D) for the change display effect of the hold display by the character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and deciding a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a change production type. In these change selection tables, the change mode is divided into “no change”, “opportunity” display, and “extreme heat” display when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result and the loss display result. The random number value MR12 for selection is allocated with different selection ratios.

  FIG. 26F is a first change effect on-hold display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined on the first change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (G) is a first change effect active display change selection table used when the display form change effect timing is selected and determined as active display, and the display form change effect type is selected and determined as the first change effect. is there. FIG. 26H is a second change effect pending display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during hold display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the second change effect. is there. FIG. 26I is a second change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the second change effect. is there.

  26 (F) to (I), “no change” indicates an aspect in which the character icon does not change, and “opportunity” display indicates an aspect in which the character icon changes to an icon of the character “opportunity”. The “Intense fever” display indicates that the character icon is changed to an icon with a character “Intense fever”.

  In FIGS. 26 (F) to (I), when the change selection random value MR12 becomes a jackpot display result, “no change <opportunity + severe heat (with change)”, and when it shows a loss display result, “change”. Allocation is based on a selection ratio of “None> Opportunity + Intense fever (changes)”. In FIGS. 26F to 26I, the random number MR12 is selected at a selection ratio of “opportunity <extreme heat” when the big hit display result is obtained, and “opportunity> extreme heat” when the loss display result is obtained. Allocated. Thereby, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to “extremely hot”, the expectation that a jackpot display result is higher than when the character icon changes to “opportunity”.

  26G used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during active display when the character icon is used for hold display, the display mode change effect timing is selected during the hold display. Compared to FIGS. 26 (F) and 26 (H) used when the decision is made, the selection ratio of “extreme heat” display is set higher when the big hit display result is obtained.

  With such a setting, as for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and (C), the proportion of the character icon display mode change selected during active display is lower than during hold display. When the result is a big hit display result, there is a ratio that the display mode change that becomes a “hot” display with a higher level of expectation that is a big hit than the “opportunity” display compared to the hold display during active display is selected high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (I), when the big hit display result is obtained, the second change effect (red effect) is more “opportunity or intense than the first change effect (blue effect). The rate of “heat (changed)” is high. Thus, when “opportunity or intense heat (changed)” is displayed by the second change effect (red effect), “opportunity or intense heat (changed)” is displayed by the first change effect (blue effect). Compared with the time of the game, the expectation level that results in the jackpot display is high, and the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ratio of the “opportunity or intense heat (changed)” display is different between the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect), so that the icon display is being suspended, Alternatively, the player can be focused on the change mode during active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  26 (J) to 26 (M) show the display mode change effect timing selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (D) for the display mode change effect of the hold display by the character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and deciding a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a display mode change production type. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result and when the display result is the loss display result, the display changes to “no change”, “two people” display, and “three people” display. The random number value MR12 for selection is allocated with different selection ratios.

  FIG. 26J is a third change effect on-hold display change selection table used when the change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display, and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined on the third change effect. FIG. 26K is a third change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being active display, and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the third change effect. is there. FIG. 26L is a fourth change effect on-hold display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined on the fourth change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (M) is a fourth change effect active display during change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display, and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the fourth change effect. is there.

  26 (J) to (M), “no change” indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, “2 people” display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon of “2 people”, and “ The “three people” display indicates that the character changes to the “three people” icon.

  26 (J) to (M), when the change selection random value MR12 is a jackpot display result, “no change <2 + 3 people (with change)”, and when the change display results, None> 2 + 3 (changes) ”. In addition, in 26 (J) to (M), the random value MR12 is selected with a selection ratio of “2 people <3 people” when the jackpot display result is obtained, and “2 people> 3 people” when the display result is lost. Is allocated. Thereby, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon does not change. Also, when the character icon changes to “3 people”, the expectation level that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon changes to “2 people”.

  When the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display when the character icon is displayed as the hold, in FIGS. 26J and 26L, the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display. Compared with FIGS. 26 (K) and (M) used in FIG. 26, the selection ratio of “three people” display is set higher when the big hit display result is obtained.

  With such a setting, as for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change is lower during active display than during active display. Proportion of selection of a display mode change that results in a “three-person” display with a higher level of expectation than a “two-person” display compared to an active display during hold display when the result is a jackpot display result Is expensive. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 26J to 26M, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the fourth change effect (red effect) is more “two people” than the third change effect (blue effect). Or the ratio of “3 people (changed)” is high. Thus, when “2 or 3 people (changed)” is displayed by the fourth change effect (red effect), “2 or 3 people (changed)” by the third change effect (blue effect). Compared to when the display is made, the degree of expectation that results in the jackpot display is high, and the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  In addition, the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect) are displayed on hold for the icon display because the ratio of “two or three (changed)” display is different. Alternatively, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode during active display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  Here, returning to FIG. 25 again, the variable display start setting process will be further described. In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 has a character icon or a character icon hold display selected by the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 24 as a newly appearing hold display. In some cases, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 26B to 26M, processing for realizing a display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display as shown in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), after the hold display is shifted in accordance with the hold on the variable display to be started, As described above, a setting process for executing the display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is performed.

  On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), the active display corresponding to the hold storage to be effected Until the time is executed, the data specifying the content of the effect selected and determined as described above is associated with the data of the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the reserved storage to be effected. The display mode change data provided in the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122, while storing the change effect designation data during active display designating that the display mode change effect is to be executed. Store in the effect storage area. Then, in step S532 of the effect execution setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display to be started is a variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect target designated by the active display change effect designation data. Display mode change during active display based on the data specifying the content of the effect stored in the display mode change effect storage area when it is determined that the display is variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the effect target The production is executed.

  By executing the processing as described above, in the performance execution setting process (S532), when the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon and the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode Effect execution setting process (S532) during the first on-hold display after the appearance of the on-hold display to be changed, or during the active display when the variable display based on the on-hold storage corresponding to the on-hold display is executed. The display mode change effect is executed based on the effect setting.

  In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table and the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the hold display displayed as “sphere”. And whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specification command, Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined from among the plurality of active display change effect effects.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined as “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  Next, a process for determining an effect mode of an active display change effect to be executed in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing an active display change effect will be described. FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27 (C) shows the determination ratio of the production style of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X is any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 represents the variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4 shown in FIG. -3 or PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. In addition, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of 12 types of first system change effects and second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

  The first system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display for active display, for example, an action effect that changes the display shape of the active display. In FIG. 27A, if the active display change effect pattern “BP1” is, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”, the display shape of the active display is “sphere”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that is not changed. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the “triangle” active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). high. Further, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “pentagon”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that becomes “lost”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the drawing, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that becomes “lost”.

  The second system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an action effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame. In FIG. 27 (B), the active display change effect pattern “CP1” has an active display frame as a default when the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is “normal”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect effect) in which the thickness of the line is not changed to “normal”. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “middle thickness”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). high. Further, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. According to the example shown in the figure, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that becomes “lost”. high. Further, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The first system change effect and the second system change effect are the active display that surrounds the active display by the above-described first system change effect and the action effect that changes the display mode of the active display. It is an action effect that performs both an effect effect that changes the display mode of the frame. In FIG. 27C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is “sphere”, and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display. If the display is “normal”, the display of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal” and the effect of failure (active display change effect) It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the active display frame shape from “normal” to “middle thickness” while keeping the active display shape “sphere” and enclosing the active display. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is for heat (for example, super reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. This is the production pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “lost”. Further, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern in an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. “AP6” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the change pattern (variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command (variable display). Display pattern) determines the active display change effect pattern as an effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

  Next, a process for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect. The ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) first system change effect execution timings according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the first system change effect execution execution timings. And The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach in the change is established, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established in the change (during reach). The pseudo continuous fluctuation time is, for example, when the variable display during the fluctuation is temporarily stopped.

  Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ small ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “small”, and “success expectation degree“ medium ”. The variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 are classified as “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the degree of success expectation “small”. Represents. Further, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ large ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “large” higher than the success expectation degree “medium”. In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are represented and classified as “success expectation degree“ maximum ””, the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is the above-described success expectation degree “high”. Represents a higher “maximum”.

  Specifically, in FIG. 27, variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change display pattern CP1 and the active display change display pattern AP1 that is the failure display of the first system change display and the second system change display is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change display patterns. The level of success is low, and the degree of success that can be executed successfully is low.

  In FIG. 27, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, and PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. In PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The success expectation at which the successful performance can be executed is higher than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the expectation that a successful effect can be executed is high due to the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG.

  In the illustrated example, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 that is not a pseudo continuous variation. −1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 represent that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2. According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, in the case of the variation pattern that becomes “big hit”, the determination ratio that is determined at a later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than the variation pattern that becomes “losing”. In addition, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful performance is higher than that before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). Further, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, the timing 1).

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random pattern MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the change pattern of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command. (Variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

  It should be noted that at the timing 2, depending on the number of temporary stops of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation, for example, immediately after the start of the revariable display, such as at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Moreover, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after reach establishment, for example, the execution timing is set to set the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation after timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

  In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. May be stored in the ROM 121 as one table. The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

  A setting example (not shown) of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect is an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the first system change effect as shown in FIG. It may be the same, or may be a setting example of a determination ratio based on a second system change effect execution timing determination table different from the determination ratio setting example based on the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the first system change effect.

  In FIG. 26, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect”, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is shown in FIG. Using the example of setting the determination ratio based on the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined collectively so as to be executed at the same timing. You may determine in a lump so that each execution timing with a system | strain change effect may become a different execution timing. 26, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect”, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately using an example of setting the determination ratio based on the effect execution timing determination table.

  Next, processing for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change An effect production pattern and an execution timing of an active display change effect are set as an effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command as an effect control pattern, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. If a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are prepared, any one is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S532) ends.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and registers each of the registers included in the game control microcomputer 100. (S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, etc. stored in the registers (for example, the general-purpose registers B and C) (S403). , S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result that is the determination result, the pending storage number updated in S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category stored in the register (for example, the general-purpose register D). Is determined (S412). The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (S413), and executes command control processing (S17). Thereby, a variation category command or the like for designating the variation category determined in S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in S217 in the variation pattern setting process (S111). The random number MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on numerical data indicating the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category and numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets transmission of a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (S17). Thereby, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, in the hold effect determination process (S160), the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the second start prize. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the storage display area 5HR is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination contents of the hold effect determination process (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer. While storing (S161), a hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second starting winning storage display area 5HR based on the stored content (display mode at the time of addition) (S162).

  On the side of the production control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, An effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the board 11.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 29A (A) and (e) of FIG. 29B (A) are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29B and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). 29A and 29B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 29A (A) and 29B (A) show the successful effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. 29A (B) and 29B (B) show failure effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  29A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene. Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA displays at least the active display AH, and includes an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW in addition to the active display AH. Characters and images can also be displayed in the active display area AHA such as inside or outside the active display AH itself or the active display frame AHW.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 29A (A), the display is suspended in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the production content corresponding to In buffer number “2” of buffer 194C, the display mode (additional display mode “white”) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number “3” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is activated as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning a prize (additional display mode “white”) is stored.

  The scene of (a) in FIG. 29A (A) starts variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed. In the scene of (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217), and the randomness for determining the special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, etc. (S403, S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the reserved storage number “4” (FIG. 16). ), The variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a variable category command that specifies the variable category “PB5” (S413), and executes a command control process (S17) so that the variable category command that specifies the variable category “PB5” is the main board 11. To the effect control board 12.

  Receiving the variation category command or the like for designating the variation category from the main board 11, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the suspension display mode to be used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. A determination table is selected, and a display mode of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display Display mode) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination processing in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode when added) are stored.

  In the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start-winning memory display area in the active display area AHA. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 29A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (A) (c) shows a case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 29A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). It is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (B) (a) to FIG. 29A (B) (c) are the same as FIG. 29A (A) (a) to FIG. 29A (A) (c). That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 29A (A) to (c) of FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  In the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. The display mode is changed. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (B). “Normal” display mode remains unchanged. In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 30B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) in FIG. 30B and (e) to (f) in FIG. 30B (B). 30A and 30B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 30A (A) and FIG. 30B (A) show the successful effects of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 27 (A) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (shape “star”)) is set. 30A (B) and FIG. 30B (B) represent failure effects of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. Nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

  30A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Scene (a) in FIG. 30A (A) starts variable display of active information on active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 30A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start-winning memory display area in the active display area AHA. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 30A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the first system change effect. The scene of (b) in FIG. 30A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the start of variable display (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). In FIG. 30A (A) (b), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 30A (A) is directed to the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In the scene of FIG. 30A (A) (d), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves from the scene of (c) of FIG. 30A to the lower part of the image display device 5, and the figure Of the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the stars Z1 continue to move. 30A (B), (a) to FIG. 30A (B), (d) are the same as FIG. 30A (A), (a) to FIG. 30A (A), (d). That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  The scene (e) in FIG. 30B (A) is the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) in FIG. 30A (A). This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. 30B (A), The display shape is changed to “star”. And in the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), it is a scene where the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (B). This is a scene that moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. 30B (B) disappears without colliding with the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1, and thus active. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode with “sphere” as it is. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) in FIG. 31B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31B and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (B). In FIGS. 31A and 31B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIG. 31A (A) and FIG. 31B (A) show the success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27C as the effect modes of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (change present (thickness “extremely thick”), change present (shape “star”)) is set. FIG. 31A (B) and FIG. 31B (B) represent failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  31A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  In the scene of (a) in FIG. 31A (A), variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA) is started. The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. FIG. 31A (A) (c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). It is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is produced. As an effect, an arrow Y <b> 2 in which the characters “Intense heat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. FIG. 31A (B) (a) to FIG. 31A (B) (c) are also the same as FIG. 31A (A) (a) to FIG. 31A (A) (c). That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 31A (A) to (c) of FIG. 31A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a common effect that is executed in common between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. Further, a scene in which the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. It is. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “ The display mode of “extremely thick” is changed. Further, in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (e), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (d). Among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

  In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the active display AH The display shape is changed to “star”. Then, in the scene of (g) in FIG. 30B (A), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene of FIG. 31A (B) (e), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of FIG. 31A (B) (d). Among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a scene that moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) in FIG. 31B (B), the active display AH in the scene of (f) in FIG. 31B (B) disappears without colliding with the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1, and thus active. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display form of “sphere”. In addition, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 32B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32B and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (B). 32A and 32B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 32A (A) and FIG. 32B (A) show the successful effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. 32A (B) and FIG. 32B (B) represent failure effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  32A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 32A (A), the display is suspended (active display AH) in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the production content corresponding to In buffer number “2” of buffer 194C, the display mode (additional display mode “white”) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number “3” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is activated as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning a prize (additional display mode “white”) is stored.

  In the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), active display of active display AH (information corresponding to hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA) is started. The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed. In the case of (a) in FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217), and the randomness for determining the special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, etc. (S403, S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the reserved storage number “4” (FIG. 16). ), The variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a variable category command that specifies the variable category “PB5” (S413), and executes a command control process (S17) so that the variable category command that specifies the variable category “PB5” is the main board 11. To the effect control board 12.

  Receiving the variation category command or the like for designating the variation category from the main board 11, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the suspension display mode to be used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. A determination table is selected, and a display mode of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display Display mode) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination processing in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode when added) are stored.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 32A (A) (c), reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 32A (A) (b), and the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design display area 5R are displayed. This is a scene where the decorative pattern is a reach. The scene of (d) of FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the 2nd system | strain change effect is performed after reach establishment (for example, the timing 3 of FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 on which characters of “hot heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 32A (B) (a) to FIG. 32A (B) (d) are the same as FIG. 32A (A) (a) to FIG. 32A (A) (d). That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  In the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. The display mode is changed.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 32B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (B). “Normal” display mode remains unchanged. Note that the active display change effect may also be executed after the reach has been established for the second system change effect. Similarly, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 33B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 33A and 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 represents that the decorative design is changing. 33A and 33B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B is different from the display operation example shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that it is a pseudo continuous variation. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R after reaching the variable display in the scene of (b) in FIG. This is a scene that is stopped and displayed in a different display mode. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of (e) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of FIG. 33A (f), all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).

  In (g) of FIG. 33B, an arrow Y2 on which characters of “hot heat” are drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. From (a) of FIG. 33A to (g) of FIG. 33B is a common effect executed in common by the successful effect and the failed effect in the second system change effect.

  In the scene of (h) in FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene colliding with. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”. ing. In addition, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as the display mode of “extremely thick”, the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) in FIG. 34B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 34A and 34B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 34A and 34B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B is different from the display operation example shown in FIG. 29A and FIG. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  FIG. 34A (c) shows that reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 34 (b), and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are reached. This is a scene that is stopped and displayed in a manner. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol indicated as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of (e) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (f) in FIG. 34A, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).

  Further, in (f) of FIG. 34A, an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” is drawn is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. Here, (a) in FIG. 34A to (f) in FIG. 34A are common effects that are executed in common by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  In the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (g) of FIG. 34B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”. This is a scene in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode. In the scene (i) of FIG. 34B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”, the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are displayed. Is in the reach mode, a chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene (j) of FIG. 34B, this chance symbol is displayed temporarily without stopping temporarily in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The decorative design of the area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 35A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 35B are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 35A and 35B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B are different in reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  FIG. 35A (c) shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of FIG. 35B (g) is a decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) in FIG. 35B, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display). Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 36B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 36A and 36B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 36A and 36B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B is different from the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B in the reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  36A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  FIG. 36A (c) shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene of FIG. 36A (d), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW. 36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a reach manner.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of (g) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of FIG. 36B (h), all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display). Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner.

  Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, examples of scenes in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner are shown in FIGS. 36A (e) and 36B (i). However, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, when the quasi-continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is handled as the timing in FIG. 36B (i). That is, the reach establishment in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B means that the quasi-continuous variation has ended and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner ( It is the scene of i).

  In FIGS. 29 to 36, the success effect can be executed at the timing when the active display change effect (the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect) is executed. When the degree of expectation is different, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the fluctuation, the expectation is executed at the second timing. This means that the degree of expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect can be executed is high.

  (Modification) Note that the display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit shown in FIG. May include a different special embodiment and a first special embodiment and a second special embodiment which are different from the normal and special embodiments. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38, and 39.

  For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the change categories. FIG. 37A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 37 (B) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37 (C) shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 37D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 37 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” is selected from the above seven types. Fig. 37 (F) shows a setting example (H-TBL5) of a mode determination ratio, which is selected when the variation category "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" is selected from the above seven types. Fig. 37G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display based on the display mode determination table, Fig. 37 (G) shows the variation category "PB5 (superly) among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when

  Comparing FIG. 37 with FIG. 24, the difference is that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 37. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 between the determination ratio for “white” and the determination ratio for “gray” in each hold display mode determination table of FIG. This is a setting example in which a determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the jackpot as the normal mode, but when the “gray” hold display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode representing high.

  In the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the special aspect, the degree of expectation for the big hit is different from that of the second special aspect (for example, the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than that of the first special aspect). May be included, such as red, which is a third special aspect that is different (for example, a higher degree of expectation for jackpot than the second special aspect).

  For example, in the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. The reserved display mode determination table to be used is selected from the tables, and additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected held display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. What is necessary is just to determine the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be performed.

  Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). . Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize received command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  Then, after executing the process of S161, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determining process (S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A). First addition of a new hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first A hold addition process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, which active is to be performed when the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the change or the active display change effect is executed. In the case of the process for determining whether to execute the display change effect, or the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, the process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed, or the active in the change Processing for determining the timing for executing the display change effect, processing for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining which active display change effect to execute when executing an active display change effect will be described. To do. When the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 is used, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio setting example based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is a special mode, the setting example of the determination ratio based on another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table is different.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38 (A) is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 38B is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the active display display mode corresponding to the variation is a special mode (gray). Each setting example shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 26, and whether or not the active display change effect is executed or when the active display change effect is executed. It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | generation aspect of an active display change production. Each setting example shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effects in the active display change effect execution determination table. The numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “execution present” and “execution non-execution” respectively at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B). In the “execution present” of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effect is “first system” For each of “change effect”, “second system change effect”, and “first system change effect and second system change effect”, determinations as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, respectively. Allocated as a percentage.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is a fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 38, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-X, PA2-X, “no execution” is 100. %, Indicating that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. Further, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of “execution” in FIGS. 38A and 38B), when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ) Is higher than that of the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of the first system change effect being executed is higher than that when the variation pattern is “losing” than the second system change effect. Moreover, when it becomes hot reach (for example, super reach), compared with the time when it becomes non-hot reach (for example, normal reach), the ratio with which both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect are performed is high. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the variation pattern is “losing”.

  In addition, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the determination ratio of whether or not the active display change effect is executed differs, and when the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the variation Compared with the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode, the determination ratio at which the active display change effect is executed is high. In addition, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38A is considered, and the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode, and FIG. In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38, when the active display corresponding to the variation is the special mode, the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. The determination ratio in which the active display change effect is executed in the order of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination random number MR7, and the change pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute an active display change effect according to a change pattern (variable display pattern) of change (the variable display), and when executing an active display change effect, among the effect modes of a plurality of active display change effects Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined as “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  Note that the graphic group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined so that the degree of expectation for the big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures constituting the graphic group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the first system detail pattern determination table when the first system change effect is executed. In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, the first system detail pattern determination table of the first system change effect includes, for example, 10 types of first system detail patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. The first system detail pattern is a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27A is determined), and the first system change effect. Reference is made when both the second system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27C is determined).

  In the first system detail pattern, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detail pattern is determined by an active display change effect pattern as shown in FIG. Assigned.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores a first system detail pattern as an effect mode of 10 types of first system change effects corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 39, the first system detail pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are all composed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when reaching a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when reaching a non-heated reach (for example, normal reach), The determination ratio determined for the first system detail pattern SHP1 is higher than that when hot reach (for example, super reach) is reached. In addition, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the details of the first system that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined variation A pattern is determined.

  Similarly, the first system detail pattern “SHP2” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of pentagons, triangles, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP3” This is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP4” includes the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 as pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP5” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are constituted by stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern “SH” "7" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern "SHP8" has three figures constituting the figure group Y1. This is an effect pattern when composed of stars, stars, triangles and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP9” is an effect when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP10” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars. According to the example shown in the drawing, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the figures constituting the figure group Y1.

  37 and 38, when the special mode is considered, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the common effect described above is performed. It may be executed as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, and an suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special manner (for example, a success effect and a failure effect) And a suggestion effect suggesting a common effect that is executed in common) may be executed in the same or different manner. In addition, when considering a special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is a special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

  In FIG. 39, in the figure group Y1 configured by the initial display (combination), the figure to be erased in the common effect may be erased from the figure that is the display mode of the active display with low expectation. For example, when the first system detail pattern SHP6 is determined as a successful effect, the display mode after the successful effect is executed among the graphic group composed of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (for example, “pentagon”), the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “triangle”) is deleted first, and the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “star”) is deleted. If it is a failure production, delete the “triangle”, “pentagon”, and “star” in the order of the three groups of figures “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle”. Also good.

  FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 40 (A) shows an example in which the display mode change is executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display. FIG. 40B shows an example in which the display mode change is not executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), the display mode change effect suggesting that the display mode changes for the hold display or the active display is the display mode of the target hold display or active display. The same effect is executed regardless of whether or not it actually changes. Then, when “no change” is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M), as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the hold display or the active display is targeted. After the display mode change effect is executed, the hold display or the active display is not changed. On the other hand, when “opportunity” display or “extreme heat” display, “two people” display or “three people” display is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M). As shown in FIG. 40 (A), after the display mode change effect for the hold display or the active display is executed, the change of the hold display or the active display is executed. As described above, execution of the display mode change effect of the hold display or the active display is different from the execution of the change of the hold display or the active display.

  Next, a character icon selection table in which data for selecting a character icon to be used as a first specific display mode for hold display or active display is set, and a character used as a second specific display mode for hold display or active display A character icon selection table in which data for selecting an icon is set will be described. These tables are stored in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 41 shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 41A shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 41B shows a character selection table.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (A), the character icon consisting of the characters “attention” in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears, and the effect selections of FIGS. 26 (F) to (I). The second change at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icon consisting of the characters of “opportunity” that can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the table and the effect selection table of FIGS. A character icon made up of characters of “hot” that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for the jackpot of these character icons has a relationship of “attention” <“opportunity” <“hot heat”.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (B), the “one person” character icon in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears and the effect selection tables of FIGS. 26 (J) to (M). It can be selected as the second change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icons of “two people” that can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect and the effect selection table of FIGS. The “three” character icons are set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for the jackpot for these character icons has a relationship of “1 person” <“2 people” <“3 people”.

  Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting the effect patterns of the first change effect to the fourth change effect described above is set will be described. The change effect pattern table is stored in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change effect pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, for each type of the first change effect to the fourth change effect, the effect pattern when the change effect is selected during the hold display and the change effect during the active display are selected. The effect pattern at the time is shown. Each of the selection for performing the change effect during the on-hold display and the selection for performing the change effect during the active display are performed using the data tables shown in FIGS.

  When the first change effect is selected to be in the hold display, the effect of the effect pattern (see FIG. 43) in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be effected is selected. To be executed. For the first change effect, when an active display is selected, an effect pattern effect in which a blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be effected. .

  When the second change effect is selected to be in the hold display, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be effected. . For the second change effect, when an active display is selected, an effect pattern effect in which a red arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be effected. .

  When the third change effect is selected to be in the hold display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts downward is selected and executed for the hold display of the effect target character icon. . For the third change effect, when an active display is selected, an effect pattern effect in which a blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be effected. .

  When the fourth change effect is selected to be in hold display, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed for the hold display of the effect target character icon. . For the fourth change effect, when an active display is selected, an effect pattern effect in which a red arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be effected. .

  Next, an effect display example when a character icon is displayed as a hold display will be described. FIG. 43 is a display screen diagram showing an example of an effect display when the character icon 61 is displayed as a hold display in the image display device 5.

  When a new first hold memory is generated and a hold display mode based on a character icon is determined using a hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24, first, as shown in FIG. A display that causes the on-hold display by the character icon 61 of “caution” display, which is a normal display mode, to appear in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is displayed.

  The change effect timing is selected and determined as “pending display” in the character hold display change effect timing selection table in FIG. 26 (B), and the change effect type in the character hold change effect type selection table in FIG. 26 (D). 43 is selected and determined as the “first change effect”, during the hold display after the first hold shift after the hold display by the character icon 61 with the “caution” display appears, FIG. As shown, a first change effect is performed as a display mode change effect, in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display by the character icon 61 of “caution” display.

  When the display after the first change effect is selected and determined to be “Intense heat” display by the change selection table during the first change effect hold display of FIG. 26 (F), as shown in FIG. After execution of the display mode change effect by the change effect, the hold display by the character icon 61 is changed from the “caution” display to the “extremely hot” display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Thus, when the hold display by the character icon 61 changes, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot for the hold display can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an effect display example when a character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 44 is a display screen diagram illustrating an effect display example of the active display after the character icon 62 is displayed as the hold display in the image display device 5.

  When a new first hold memory is generated and the hold display mode based on the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24, first, as shown in FIG. A display that causes the hold display by the character icon 62, which is the “one person” display, which is the normal display mode, to appear in the first start winning storage area 5HL is displayed. In the state of FIG. 44A, after the on-hold display with the character icon 62 of “one person” appears and is displayed, the previous on-hold display is digested, and the on-hold display for the next variable display is “1”. A state in which the character icon 62 of “person” is displayed on hold is shown.

  Then, the change effect timing is selected and determined as “active display” by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 26 (C), and changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 26 (E). When the effect type is selected and determined as “fourth change effect”, the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 62 displayed as “one person” as shown in FIG. 44B is displayed in the active display area. In AHA, the character icon 62 of “one person” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44B, a red arrow is displayed next to the active display by the character icon 62 of “one person” as a display mode change effect. A fourth change effect acting from the direction is executed.

  Then, when the display after the third change effect is selected and determined to be “three people” display by the fourth change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 26 (M), as shown in FIG. After execution of the change effect by the fourth change effect, the hold display by the character icon 62 is changed from the “one person” display to the “three person” display in the active display area AHA. As described above, when the active display by the character icon 62 is changed, the player's expectation for the big hit of the current variation display can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an icon effect is included in the effect execution setting process (S532), and an icon effect for setting an effect when performing a hold display with a character icon and a character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. The setting process will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing icon effect setting processing. About the process for setting the production | presentation at the time of the hold display or active display by a character icon and a character icon using the various data tables of FIG.26 (B)-(M), the production | presentation execution setting process mentioned above (S532). In FIG. 45, in order to clarify the flow of setting the effect when the character icon and the character icon are displayed on hold or active, the specific example of the icon effect setting process is described above. Processing contents will be described.

  In the table of FIG. 24, the icon effect setting process is executed when the character icon or the character icon hold display mode is selected and determined. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the following process. First, the random value MR10 is extracted, and the change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C) is used according to the character icon selected in the table of FIG. Then, either “pending display” or “active display” is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change effect (S700).

  Next, the random value MR11 is extracted, and the change shown in FIG. 26D or FIG. 26E is performed according to the change effect execution timing of “pending display” or “active display” selected and determined in S700. Using the effect type selection table, “first change effect” or “second change effect” is selected and determined for “pending display”, and “third change effect” or “ The “fourth change effect” is selected and determined (S701).

  Next, it is determined whether or not “first change effect” has been selected and determined in S701 (S702). If it is determined in S702 that the “first change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S700 (S703). When it is determined in S703 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the first change effect during the hold display, the random value MR12 is extracted, and the first change effect hold in FIG. The display change mode after the first change effect is selected from “no change”, “opportunity” display, and “extreme heat” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) using the display change selection table. Is selected and determined (S704), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S703 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the first change effect during active display. 26G, using the first change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 26 (G), “no change”, “opportunity” display, “extreme heat” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change effect (S705), and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S701 that the “first change effect” is not selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the “second change effect” is selected and determined in S701 (S706). If it is determined in S706 that the “second change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S700 (S707).

  When it is determined in S707 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the second change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 is extracted, and the second change effect hold in FIG. The display change mode after the second change effect is selected from “No change”, “Opportunity” display, and “Intense fever” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) using the display change selection table. Is selected and determined (S708), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S707 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the second change effect during active display. 26, and using the change selection table during the second change effect active display of FIG. 26 (I), “no change”, “opportunity” display, “extreme heat” display is displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss). One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change effect (S709), and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S706 that the “second change effect” is not selected and determined, it is determined whether or not the “third change effect” is selected and determined in S701 (S710). When it is determined in S710 that the “third change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S700 (S711). If it is determined in S711 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the third change effect during the hold display, the random value MR12 is extracted, and the third change effect hold in FIG. Using the display change selection table, the display change after the third change effect is selected from “No change”, “2 people” display, and “3 people” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) The mode is selected and determined (S712), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S711 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number MR12 is used to execute the third change effect during active display. , And using the third change effect active display change selection table in FIG. 26 (K), “no change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) Is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change effect (S713), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S701 that the “third change effect” is not selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the “fourth change effect” is selected and determined in S701 (S714). If it is determined in S714 that the “fourth change effect” is selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S700 (S715). When it is determined in S715 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the fourth change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 is extracted, and the fourth change effect hold in FIG. Using the display change selection table, the display change after the fourth change effect is selected from “No change”, “2 people” display, and “3 people” display depending on the display result (big hit, loss) The mode is selected and determined (S716), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S715 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the fourth change effect during active display. , And using the fourth change effect active display change selection table in FIG. 26 (M), “no change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” display according to the display result (big hit, loss) Is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change effect (S717), and the process ends.

  By the icon effect setting process described above, an effect using a character icon or a character icon is set, and the variable display effect process (S172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, FIG. Such a hold display mode change effect and a variation corresponding display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 44 are executed.

[Modification of display mode change effect by icon display]
Next, various modified examples of the effect of active display as described above will be described.

  (A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) to (M), FIG. 43, and FIG. 44, a total of 2 times of one timing during hold display and one timing during active display The example which enabled the display mode change effect which changes the display mode of a character icon display or a character icon display at any one timing among the two timings was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 46, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display is selected from a plurality of timings. FIG. 46A shows a first start-winning storage display area 5HL and an active display area AHA for explaining the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 46 (B) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B). FIG. 46 (C) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (C).

  Referring to FIG. 46 (A), in this modified example, character icon display is performed at any one of three timings including two timings during hold display and one timing during active display. Alternatively, it is possible to execute a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display. The two display mode change effect execution timings during the hold display are, for example, the numbers “2” in the hold display areas numbered “1” to “4” in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. When the hold display is made in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the second old hold storage marked with is displayed (in the first hold display), the first old hold with the number “1” is given. There are two cases when the hold display is made in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the storage is made (during the second hold display).

  In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one timing selected from the three timings during the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. In this modification, when the hold display is performed with the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. In the table of FIG. 46 (B), as in the table of FIG. 26 (B), the ratio at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected during the active display is set lower than during the active display. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. In the table of FIG. 46 (C), as in the table of FIG. 26 (C), the ratio at which the character icon display mode change is selected during the hold display is set lower than during the active display. With this setting, in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, if it does in this way, the production will be more varied, and the fun of the production can be further improved.

  Further, when the hold display is performed with the character icon display, the closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears, the higher the selected ratio is set. Thereby, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, when the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the first hold display, and when the display mode change is executed at the timing during the second hold display. The selection ratio of “no change”, “opportunity” display, and “extreme heat” display may be different (for example, the higher the selection ratio, the lower the selection ratio of “extreme heat” display).

  In this modification, for example, a part (two) of four hold display areas is targeted, and the display mode change effect can be executed during the hold display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed during the hold display for all the hold display areas. For active display, the period during which active display is continued is divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the plurality of periods is set as a period during which the display mode change effect can be executed, and any of the periods is changed in the display mode. It is good also as selection as a period which performs production. If it does in this way, the production will be more varied and the fun of the production can be further improved.

  The timing of executing the display mode change effect includes those described as the embodiment and the modification described above, and among the plurality of timings during the holding display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target holding storage. Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

  (B) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, when the hold display is a character icon, an example in which the display mode of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect is shown. When it is an icon, the example in which the display mode of the character icon is changed by the display mode change effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to a character icon or the like by a display mode change effect at a predetermined rate. You may produce the effect which changes to another icon. Further, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon may be changed to another icon such as a character icon by a display mode change effect at a predetermined rate. If such an effect is given, the player can be noticed that a change in the display mode of the specific display (display mode of the icon) or a change in the type of specific display (the type of icon) occurs. Interest can be further improved.

  In this modification, for example, an icon display that can be displayed at the appearance of the hold display, such as a character icon and a character icon, may be used as the icon after the change. A specific icon display may be used.

  (C) An active display change effect (success effect) and an active display change effect (failure effect) as described with reference to FIGS. It may be applied to the active display. Specifically, after the active display is started with the icon shape as described above, in the first system change effect as described above, the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, or the second system change effect. Then, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display is executed.

  Thereafter, a success or failure effect is executed. As a successful effect, in the first system change effect, an effect in which one of the shapes “star” of the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display and the “icon display changes to a display form with a star crown”, In the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed and active. An effect or the like for changing the display mode such as the display or active display frame is executed.

  On the other hand, as the failure effect, in the first system change effect, the effect disappears before any figure “star” shape of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, and the display state of the active display does not change, In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the effect that the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed, the first system change effect and the second system change effect are both An effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame is executed.

  That is, a common effect (common effect) is executed when the active display mode is changed and when it is not changed. In this case, as described above, control is performed so that the ratio of executing the successful effect varies depending on at which timing the common effect is executed among the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.

  As described above, when the active display displayed through the above-described display mode change effect is executed, the active display change effect (success effect) or the like described with reference to FIGS. The degree of expectation for the big hit may be higher than when the active display change effect or the like is not executed after the active display displayed through the aspect change effect is executed.

  (D) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executable at both the hold display time and the active display timing.

  (E) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 has been shown to be executable at any one timing during the hold display period and the active display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed stepwise at a plurality of times during the hold display period and the active display period. In this case, for example, the icon display change mode may be selected in a plurality of stages, and the icon display may be selected and set so that the icon display can be changed in stages at a plurality of times.

  (F) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display or the active display that is the target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 is displayed in an icon shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display or active display that is the target of the display mode change effect may be any display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, “sphere”), and is not limited to the icon shape. . Therefore, the hold display or the active display hold display that is the target of the display form change effect is a display form (for example, different in size, color, etc.) that is different from the display form such as the shape and color that the normal display acquires even if it is a sphere. Are different).

  (G) When there are a plurality of types of hold display or active display (for example, icon display types selected during hold appearance display) that are the targets of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. Among a plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, there may be a type in which no display mode change effect is executed during the hold display period, and no display mode change effect is executed during the active display period. Types that are not included may be included.

  (H) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when the start display (on hold storage) is performed, the hold display that is the target of execution of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. Although an example in which only the display mode at the time of appearance display is selected and determined has been shown, during such start winning (at the time of holding storage), during the holding display or active display as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M) The final display mode (no change, “opportunity”, “extreme heat”, “2 people”, “3 people”, etc.) after the on-hold display mode change effect may be selected and determined.

  (I) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the display mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. The character icon is determined, but the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may be selected and determined as in the “sphere” described above. That is, the display mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the display mode change effect, may be capable of selecting and determining a combination of the icon shape and the icon color. The same icon may be set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the selected color.

  (J) The display mode change effect of the icon display described above may be executed on the condition that the reserved number is a predetermined number or more such as three or four.

  (K) The icon display during the hold display and the icon display during the active display need not be the same icon display. For example, the icon display during hold display is displayed in a first color such as white, while the icon display during active display is displayed in a second color such as black, The display mode of the icon display during active display may be partially different. In addition, as for the character icons, the characters of the icons that are on hold display are displayed in Mincho style, and the characters of the icons that are currently active display are displayed in block style. . As for the character icons, the number of persons may be the same, but the gender may be different, for example, the icon displayed on hold is displayed as a male character and the icon displayed as active is displayed as a female character.

  (L) In the embodiment described above, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed by the same display means (image display device 5) has been described. (For example, the hold display is displayed on the first image display device and the active display is displayed on the second image display device).

  (M) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas is shown. However, the display is not limited to this, and the display may be switched using the same display area. Good (for example, the active display area is not displayed when the hold display is displayed, and the hold display area is not displayed when the active display is displayed).

  (N) In the embodiment described above, the display mode change effect presentation mode (type) may be different depending on the display mode of the icon display (character icon, character icon). For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (effect mode) of icon display may be provided and the effect may be executed.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 26 (B) and FIG. 26 (C), when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, it is more during the hold display than when it is the display mode of the character icon. The rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is higher than during active display. On the other hand, when the display mode is the character icon display mode, the display mode change effect is executed more actively during the active display mode than when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Thereby, the player is focused on the display type (for example, the display type of character icon and character icon) to be changed in the display mode change effect and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of holding display and active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  (2) About the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M), the ratio of the display mode actually changing after the execution of the display mode change effect is being displayed on hold. Is equal to that during active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display display change effect is higher in the hold display than in the active display, compared to when the character icon display mode, When the display mode of the character icon is based on the fact that the display mode change effect is executed more actively during the active display than when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display is different. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode during active display is different. Thereby, about the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to changes in the game.

  (3) As described above, when the active display mode is changed during execution of variable display and when the common display is executed in common, the active display mode after executing the common effect is changed. It is possible to execute a success effect that changes or a failure effect that does not change the mode, and among the multiple timings during the execution of variable display, the proportion of execution of the success effect depends on at which timing the common effect is executed Since they are different, it is possible to pay attention to the execution timing of the common performance. Further, the player's expectation can be improved by paying attention to the execution timing of the common performance.

  (4) As a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to another icon such as a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined rate. An explanation has been given of an effect of changing a character icon to another icon such as a character icon by a display mode change effect at a predetermined rate when the hold display is a character icon. Then, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the specific display (icon display mode) or the change in the type of specific display (the type of icon), thereby further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  (5) As shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (I), the “opportunity or intense heat (with change)” display is displayed in the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect). By changing the ratio of being played, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode during the pending display or the active display of the icon display, and to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 26 (J) to (M) and the like, the display of “2 or 3 people (with change)” is displayed in the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect). By changing the ratio of being played, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode during the pending display or the active display of the icon display, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  (6) As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), the ratio of selecting the display state change of the character icon is lower during active display than during suspension display. As shown in F) to (I), when a big hit display result is obtained, the level of expectation that is a big hit is higher than the “opportunity” display compared to the active display during the hold display, and the “hot” display The ratio at which the display mode change is selected is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing. As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), the ratio of the character icon display mode change is lower during active display than during active display. )-(M) When the result is a big hit display result, the “three people” display has a higher level of expectation than the “two people” display compared to the active display during the hold display. The ratio at which the display mode change is selected is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display by the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has a variable display (for example, a special figure) after the game medium passes through a start area (for example, a first start prize opening, a second start prize opening, etc.) provided in the game area. Variable display of decorative information, variable display of decorative design, special display and variable display of decorative design, etc. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on variable display means for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol or the like) 1 and the like, and with respect to the variable display of the identification information in which the game medium has passed the start area but the variable display start condition is not satisfied, the hold storage means for storing the hold information up to a predetermined upper limit number ( For example, the first The reserved storage unit 151A, the second special drawing storage unit 151B, the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), and the holding information stored in the storage unit A hold display means for performing a hold display in a predetermined display mode for each (for example, a process of adding a hold display to the first start winning memory display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of S162, or a second hold addition of S165 In the process, a process for adding a hold display to the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) and a display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display based on the fact that the variable display start condition is established A special image representing information (for example, an active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA, Are provided in a predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA includes a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display). A special image display means for displaying at least the active display AH and displaying it in the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, a region including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW, etc. When the display mode of the special image is changed and the display mode of the special image is not changed during execution of variable display of the identification information (for example, the first system change effect) In the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 For example, an effect until the collision with the active display frame that surrounds the active display) and a successful effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, a group of figures in the active display) In an effect in which any one of the shapes of Y1 “star” collides to change to a star display mode or a second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame Or the effect of changing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect to change the display mode such as active display or active display frame) or the display mode of the special image Unsuccessful effects (for example, in the first system change effect, the active display disappears before any figure “star” in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display. In an effect in which the aspect is not changed or in the second system change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, An effect execution means capable of executing both the system change effect and the second system change effect to change the active display or the display mode of one or both of the active display frames, etc. Of the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display, the ratio of executing the successful rendering differs depending on at which timing the common rendering is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that determines whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode constituting a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after reach establishment).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display as compared with the case where the common effect is performed at the first timing of variable display of the identification information being executed. In the case of execution, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, prior determination means for deciding whether or not to use the specific display result before deriving and displaying the variable display display result (for example, in the processing of S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the number of reserved memories) Based on the above, a variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Determination process, a process for determining a special figure display result or a jackpot type in the winning random number determination process in S220, etc.) and the reservation stored in the reservation storage means before the determination by the prior determination means Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the information becomes the specific display result (for example, in the special symbol normal process of S110) Determining whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed), and the specific determination means An effect executing means capable of executing a hold notice effect for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the determination target in any one of a plurality of display modes, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect to suggest, and the display mode of the hold display is a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. The production execution means includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect, and the production execution means holds the hold information corresponding to the hold information determined by the specific determination means at different ratios according to the determination result of the specific determination means. Display the above Display in one special mode or the second special mode, and it is possible to display the hold display by changing to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. The effect execution means may execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

  In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. May be.

  Moreover, after the hold display is displayed in a special manner as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, for example, the execution ratio for executing the above-described common effect as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect is different. After the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect with respect to the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, the success effect and the failure effect are executed in common). For example, the suggestion effect suggesting the common effect) may be increased so that the execution ratio of executing the same effect or the different effect is different. When the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 is a special mode, For example, it may be increased so that the execution ratio for executing the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode is different.

  In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect has been described. However, when the main notice effect is not affected, the notice effect such as another main notice effect or the pre-read notice effect is executed with the same variation. Alternatively, if the main notice effect such as other main notice effects or pre-read notice effects are not affected, the main notice effect may be executed with the same variation. Here, the case where there is no influence means that the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change when executing a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) in the change. Or in the case where a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect form of each notice effect.

  In the above description, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. For example, a character with a hammer appears as a hold effect with respect to the hold display, and an action effect is performed by hitting the first hold display with a hammer. This is a decorative design when the display mode of the hold display is changed, or when the decorative design is composed of a total of nine types of eight types of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” and one character image. It may be an effect mode in which the character jumps out of the character image and the action effect is executed on the target hold display.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, it is determined whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example based on the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 24 or 37, and the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as next fluctuation.

  In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a graphic group constituted by a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame is indicated by an arrow. However, it may not be a figure or an arrow. For example, it may be an effect mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame.

  In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described. However, like the setting example based on the hold display mode determination table as illustrated in FIGS. For example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in either four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed according to the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, and added by the color of the hold display or the characters or symbols drawn on the hold display The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be displayed, and the display mode of the hold display is determined so as to be additionally displayed depending on the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.) Well, keep Viewing motion (e.g., the character of the operation patterns and the like in the hold display of character) may determine the hold display of the display mode to be added indicated by like.

  In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or the active display may be deleted when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. The active display may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

  In the above description, after a common effect is performed on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, a display mode of a special image representing information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display Although an example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image representing information including the active display corresponding to the successful display corresponding to the variable display and the hold display corresponding to the variable display has been described, the start winning storage display area 5H Successful display or display mode of the hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display after executing the common effect that is executed in common between the success display and the failure display for any of the hold displays displayed in You may perform the failure production which does not change.

  In addition, after performing a success or failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display corresponds to the hold display. A success effect or a failure effect may be further executed on the special image representing the information including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, each of the hold displays displayed in the start prize storage display area 5H at step 160 and step 163 in FIG. On the other hand, the presence / absence of execution of the success or failure effect for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variable category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display. As shown in FIG. 10, the success / failure performance execution / non-execution of the special image representing the information including the active display at that time, the display mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the variation category. What is necessary is just to memorize | store the determined content in the 1st prefetch notice buffer 194C and the 2nd prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character “Intense heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, and other characters May be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect depends on which of the second system change effects is selected from the plurality of types of second system change effects. The expected degree of execution may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect suggesting a display mode of the special image after execution of the successful effect by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various configurations including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, a hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H If there is a hold display displayed in a special manner in any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, either the hold display displayed in the start win memory display area 5H or the active display. On the other hand, a hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed.

  (3) Either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the active display mode. In this case, for example, the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame are displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so as to be a display mode of a color that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the color of the held display that has been displayed (for example, yellow or red in the case of the hold display that was displayed in blue) The color at may be changed.

  (4) The active display color included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA varies depending on the color of the active display. A setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode set as shown in 27 (C) may be used, and a successful production for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the display mode determination ratio that is set so that the display ratio of the active display such as the color of the active display after the display is different may be used.

  (5) For example, the ratio of “execution present” and “no execution” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” in the setting example of the determination ratio in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. , 45% (the sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect and the second system change effect 20%) vs. 55% as “executed” and “not executed” The ratio of “executed” and “not executed” is 0% vs. 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. The ratio according to the embodiment may be set such that one of a plurality is set as 0%.

  (6) In the probability variation control, a gaming machine may be provided in which a specific area is provided in advance in the special winning opening and the gaming ball is controlled to be in a certain probability state based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, a game ball enters a specific area in the big prize opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. It may be a gaming machine that controls to an easy gaming state and controls to a probable change state based on the passing of a game ball through this specific area.

  (7) In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various presentation operations including the display operation of the presentation image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

  (8) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a gaming score or a gaming score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, A game is performed by driving the game ball enclosed in the game area into the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball is awarded in the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that add points. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  (9) In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  (10) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in the memory | storage device which a computer apparatus etc. have. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  (11) The game is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the downloaded program and data via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is possible to adopt a form in which execution is possible, or a form in which execution is performed directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within a range of 0% to 100% Of these, values including 0%, values including 100%, values not including 0% and 100% may be used.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation state control example is shown in which the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation jackpot, and then is controlled unconditionally to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 7. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, production symbols, and ordinary symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention has a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not it is a big hit, determines the big hit type and the variation pattern type at the time of winning (pre-reading determination), and shows the result of the winning determination (Symbol determination result designation command, variation category command) is transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect is executed on the effect control microcomputer side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. For example, the winning control determination (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command designating only the values of the random number values MR1 and MR2 extracted when the start winning is generated, and the effect control microcomputer side uses these commands. You may comprise so that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed based on the value of the designated random number.

  (17) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine,
151A First special figure storage unit,
151B 2nd special figure storage section,
194A Received command buffer at the time of the first start winning prize,
194B Received command buffer at the second start winning prize,
5 image display device,
102 RAM,
5HL first start winning memory display area,
5HR second start winning memory display area,
120 CPU for effect control,
Y1 figure group,
Y2 arrow,
AHA Active display area.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays a change and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Extraction means for extracting numerical data when the game medium passes through the starting area;
After the numerical data extracted by the extracting means is stored in the temporary storage area, with respect to the variable display that has not yet started, the reserved storage means for storing the numerical data stored in the temporary storage area as the reserved storage;
A hold display means capable of displaying the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display;
A variation correspondence display means capable of performing a variation correspondence display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the determination means;
At least of a hold display mode change that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and a change corresponding display mode change that changes the mode of the change correspondence display during the execution of the change display Display mode changing means capable of executing any display mode change at any one of a plurality of timings during a period of a hold display period and a variable display period corresponding to a target hold storage; Prepared,
The determination means determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on numerical data stored in the temporary storage area;
The display mode changing means is a selection ratio of timing for executing the display mode change according to whether the display type of the change target is the first specific display or the second specific display different from the normal display A gaming machine characterized by having different

Images